دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsTVs & monitorsS20C300BL

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

S19C300B

S19C300F

S19C300N

S20C300BL

S20C300FL

S20C300NL

S22C300B

S22C300F

S22C300H

S22C300N

S24C300B

S24C300H

S24C300HL

ﺭﺎﻌﺷﺇ ﻥﻭﺩ ﺮﻴﻴﻐﺘﻠﻟ ﺕﺎﻔﺻﺍﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻀﺨﺗﻭ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﻼﺘﺧﺎﺑ ﺮﻬﻈﻤﻟﺍﻭ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ ﺪﻗ

ءﺍﺩﻷﺍ ﻦﻴﺴﺤﺗ ﺽﺮﻐﺑ ﻖﺒﺴﻣ.

BN46-00311A-11

Summary of content (154 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪S19C300F‬‬ ‫‪S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪S20C300BL‬‬ ‫‪S20C300FL‬‬ ‫‪S20C300NL‬‬ ‫‪S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪S22C300F‬‬ ‫‪S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪S22C300N‬‬ ‫‪S24C300B‬‬ ‫‪S24C300H‬‬ ‫‪S24C300HL‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300F / S20C300FL / S19C300
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) D-SUB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪S19C300F / S19C300B) DVI‬‬ ‫‪/ S22C300B / S20C300FL / S20C300BL /‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪S19C300B) DVI-HDMI‬‬ ‫‪/ S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F /‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"HDMI‬‬
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Brightness 50 Brightness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 50 Contrast 51 Contrast ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 51 Sharpness 52 Sharpness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 52 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright 53 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 53 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle 54 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 54 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale 55 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 55 Image Size 56 Image Size ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 56 H-Position & V-Position 58 V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 58 Coarse 59 Coarse ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 59 Fine 60 Fine ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 60 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ S20C300FL / S20C300B
PAGE 5
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Brightness 61 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ Brightness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 61 (S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N) Contrast 62 Contrast ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 62 Sharpness 63 Sharpness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 63 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright 64 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 64 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle 65 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 65 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale 66 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 66 Image Size 67 Image Size ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 67 H-Position & V-Position 68 V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 68 Coarse 69 Coarse ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 69 Fine 70
PAGE 6
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Brightness 71 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ Brightness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 71 (S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H) Contrast 72 Contrast ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 72 Sharpness 73 Sharpness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 73 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright 74 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 74 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle 76 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 76 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale 77 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 77 Image Size 78 Image Size ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 78 HDMI Black Level 80 HDMI Black Level ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 80 H-Position & V-Position 81 V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H-Po
PAGE 7
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Red 84 Red ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 84 Green 85 Green ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 85 Blue 86 Blue ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 86 Color Tone 87 Color Tone ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 87 Gamma 88 Gamma ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 88 Language 89 Language ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 89 Menu V-Position ‫ ﻭ‬Menu H-Position 90 Menu V-Position ‫ ﻭ‬Menu H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 90 Display Time 91 Display Time ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 91 Transparency 92 Transparency ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 92 ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 7
PAGE 8
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Reset 93 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ (Reset) ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 93 Eco Saving 94 Eco Saving ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 94 S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F) / S19C300B S24C300B / S22C300F / (S22C300B Off Timer 95 Off Timer ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 95 Turn Off After 96 Turn Off After ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 96 PC/AV Mode 97 PC/AV Mode ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 97 Key Repeat Time 98 Key Repeat Time ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 98 Source Detection 99 Source Detection ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 99 Customized Key 100 Customized Key ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 100 Reset 101 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴ
PAGE 9
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Reset 107 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ (Reset) ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 107 (S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H) Eco Saving 108 Eco Saving ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 108 Off Timer 109 Off Timer ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 109 Turn Off After 110 Turn Off After ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 110 PC/AV Mode 111 PC/AV Mode ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 111 Key Repeat Time 112 Key Repeat Time ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 112 Source Detection 113 Source Detection ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 113 Customized Key 114 Customized Key ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 114 INFORMATION 115 INFORMATION ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ 115 ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬Contrast
PAGE 10
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪121‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء‬ ‫‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪121‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪121‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪121‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪© 2013 Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍءﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪(.
PAGE 14
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺘﺰ )ﺭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺪ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ ً‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻋﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪GAS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺡ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻇﻬﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 45‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺄﺩﺍ ٍﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪1.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B / S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ .(Analog/DVI‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ "ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫الرموز‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫الوصف‬ ‫فتح قائمة العرض على الشاشة (‪ )OSD‬أو إغالقها أو العودة إلى القائمة األخيرة‪.‬‬ ‫قفل التحكم بالقوائم التي تظهر على الشاشة‪ :‬الحفاظ على اإلعدادات الحالية أو تأمين التحكم في‬ ‫العرض على الشاشة لتفادي التغييرات غير المقصودة على اإلعدادات‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ" ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ" ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ "ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Auto Adjustment‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Analog‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ" ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪(.
PAGE 31
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.2.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B / S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪DC 14V‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﻮّﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVI IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.DP‬‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪DC 14V‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﻮّﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪DC 14V‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﻮّﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪1.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ "ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ" ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ" ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻀﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗُﻤﺴﻚ ﺑﻌﻨﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻔﺼﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫‪1.3.3‬‬ ‫)‪(S22C300F / S20C300FL / S19C300F‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺑﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.4‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪~ 20‬‬ ‫‪° (±2‬‬ ‫)‪°‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫( ‪-1°‬‬ ‫)‪±2°‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.5‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪2.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) D-SUB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪DVI‬‬ ‫‪2.2.2‬‬ ‫)‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B / S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVI IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DVI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ DVI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.4‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H) "HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.6‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻤﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DC 14V‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DC 14V‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.7‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪ (http://www.samsung.com/‬ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪.
PAGE 45
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.8‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The optimal resolution for this‬‬ ‫‪monitor is as follows:‬‬ ‫‪**** x **** **Hz‬‬ ‫‪Use the above settings to set‬‬ ‫‪the resolution on your PC.‬‬ ‫‪English‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪EXIT‬‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.9‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ TFT-LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows 8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪3.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪3.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Mode1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Mode2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫‪3.3.
PAGE 53
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.4.
PAGE 54
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ً‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.5.
PAGE 55
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪3.6.
PAGE 56
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Image Size‬‬ ‫‪3.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Image Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.AV‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪H-Position & V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Image Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.9‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪3.9.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Coarse‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Fine 3.10‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "Fine‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪3.10.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Fine‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Fine‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪4.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Mode1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Mode2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫‪4.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ً‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.5.
PAGE 66
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪4.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Image Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪H-Position & V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Image Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ 480P‬ﺃﻭ ‪576P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 720P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.9‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪4.9.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Coarse‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Fine 4.10‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "Fine‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪4.10.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Fine‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Fine‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪5.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪5.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Mode1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Mode2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫‪5.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.4‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PICTURE‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪Enter‬‬ ‫‪Enter‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪Dynamic‬‬ ‫‪Custom‬‬ ‫‪Standard‬‬ ‫‪Movie‬‬ ‫‪Custom‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪Wide‬‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC Angle‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫‪Adjust‬‬ ‫‪Move‬‬ ‫‪Return‬‬ ‫‪Return‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﺇﻟﻲ ‪ ،AV‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫
PAGE 76
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ً‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.5.
PAGE 77
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪5.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.7‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Image Size‬‬ ‫‪5.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Image Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.AV‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.8‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪HDMI Black Level‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪.HDMI Black Level‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.8.
PAGE 81
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.9‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪H-Position & V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Image Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ 480P‬ﺃﻭ ‪576P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 720P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Coarse 5.10‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪5.10.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Coarse‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪/ S22C300H‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Fine 5.11‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "Fine‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪5.11.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Fine‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Fine‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪Red‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Red‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Green‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Green‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Green‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Blue‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Blue‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Blue‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Color Tone‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪6.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Color Tone‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Color Tone‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Gamma‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (Gamma‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪6.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Gamma‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Gamma‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Language‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ Menu H-Position‬ﻭ ‪Menu V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :Menu H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Menu V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ Menu H-Position‬ﻭ ‪Menu V-Position‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Display Time‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪7.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Transparency‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ MENU SETTINGS‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪(Reset‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Reset‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Eco Saving‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪8.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Off Timer‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Turn Off After‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 23‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Off Timer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪8.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Turn Off After‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AV‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ُ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 16:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪.16:10‬‬ ‫‪8.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Key Repeat Time‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Source Detection‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.Source Detection‬‬ ‫‪8.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Source Detection‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Source Detection‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 100
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪S20C300FL / S20C300BL / S19C300F / S19C300B‬‬ ‫‪(S24C300B / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫‪Customized Key‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ Customized Key‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.8.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Customized Key‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Customized Key‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪(Reset‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Reset‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Eco Saving‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪9.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Off Timer‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 104
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Turn Off After‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 23‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Off Timer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪9.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Turn Off After‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Key Repeat Time‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 106
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S22C300N / S20C300NL / S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪Customized Key‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ Customized Key‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Customized Key‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Customized Key‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Reset 10.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪(Reset‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Reset‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 108
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Eco Saving 10.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Eco Saving‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪10.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Off Timer 10.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Off Timer‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Turn Off After 10.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 23‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Off Timer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪10.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Turn Off After‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode 10.5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AV‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ُ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 16:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪.16:10‬‬ ‫‪10.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Key Repeat Time 10.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Key Repeat Time‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 113
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Source Detection 10.7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.Source Detection‬‬ ‫‪10.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Source Detection‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Source Detection‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 114
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫)‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪Customized Key 10.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ Customized Key‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.8.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Customized Key‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Customized Key‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪INFORMATION 11.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪INFORMATION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 11.2‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ Brightness‬ﻭ ‪ Contrast‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Brightness, Contrast‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 117
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪MagicTune 12.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MagicTune‬؟‬ ‫‪12.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ "‪ "MagicTune‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪12.1.2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪12.1.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "™‪ "MagicTune‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ‪.Windows‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "™‪ ،"MagicTune‬ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ"‪.
PAGE 119
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪MultiScreen 12.2‬‬ ‫‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "‪ "MultiScreen‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪12.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪."MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪"MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 60‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪12.2.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ "‪ "MultiScreen‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪.
PAGE 121
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 13.1‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪13.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.Not Optimum Mode‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 2.3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ"(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Coarse‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 13.2‬ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ؟‬ ‫‪123‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows ME/2000‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 124
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows ME/2000‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 125
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.1‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S19C300N / S19C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S19C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 18.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 47‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 409.8‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 230.4‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.300‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.300‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪S19C300N‬‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 126
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪S19C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪126‬‬ ‫‪S19C300N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 127
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.2‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S19C300F‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S19C300F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 18.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 47‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 409.8‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 230.4‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.300‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.300‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 128
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪S19C300F‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.
PAGE 129
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.3‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S20C300NL / S20C300BL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S20C300BL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 19.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 49‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 432.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 236.34‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.27‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.27‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪S20C300NL‬‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 130
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪S20C300BL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪130‬‬ ‫‪S20C300NL‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 131
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.4‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S20C300FL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S20C300FL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 19.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 49‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 432.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 236.34‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.27‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.27‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 132
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪S20C300FL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 133
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.5‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S22C300N / S22C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S22C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 21.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 54‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 476.64‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 268.11‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.24825‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.24825‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪S22C300N‬‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 134
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪S22C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪134‬‬ ‫‪S22C300N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 135
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.6‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S22C300F‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S22C300F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 21.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 54‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 476.64‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 268.11‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.24825‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.24825‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 136
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪S22C300F‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.
PAGE 137
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.7‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S24C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S24C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 61‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 531.36‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 298.89‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.27675‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 0.27675‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 81~30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75~56‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 138
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪S24C300B‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.
PAGE 139
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.8‬ﻋﺎﻡ )‪(S24C300HL / S24C300H / S22C300H‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪S22C300H‬‬ ‫‪S24C300H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 21.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 54‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 61‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 23.6‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 59‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 476.64‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 268.11‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 531.36‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 298.89‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 521.28‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 293.22‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.24825‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 0.24825‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 0.27675‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 0.27675‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 0.
PAGE 140
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.
PAGE 141
‫‪14‬‬ ‫المواصفات‬ ‫‪ 14.9‬موفر الطاقة‬ ‫تعمل وظيفة توفير الطاقة في هذا المنتج على خفض استهالك الطاقة عن طريق إيقاف تشغيل الشاشة والتحكم في حالة مؤشر الطاقة ‪LED‬‬ ‫في حالة عدم استخدام المنتج لفترة زمنية محددة‪ .‬علمًا بأنه ال يتم إيقاف تشغيل الطاقة في وضع توفير الطاقة‪ .‬لتشغيل الشاشة مرة أخرى‪،‬‬ ‫حرك الماوس‪ .‬جدير بالذكر أن وظيفة وضع توفير الطاقة تعمل فقط أثناء توصيل المنتج بكمبيوتر‬ ‫اضغط على أي مفتاح من لوحة المفاتيح أو ّ‬ ‫تعمل وظيفة توفير الطاقة به‪.
PAGE 142
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ‪ / S**C300‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 0.45‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪(.‬‬ ‫®‪ ENERGY STAR‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Energy Star‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ®‪ Energy Star‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 143
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 14.10‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) CDT‬ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 144
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪S20C300FL / S20C300NL / S20C300BL‬‬ ‫‪144‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪400 × 720 :IBM‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪70.087‬‬ ‫‪28.322‬‬ ‫‪+/-‬‬ ‫‪480 × 640 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪59.940‬‬ ‫‪25.175‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪480 × 640 :MAC‬‬ ‫‪35.000‬‬ ‫‪66.667‬‬ ‫‪30.240‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪480 × 640 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪37.861‬‬ ‫‪72.809‬‬ ‫‪31.500‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪480 × 640 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪37.
PAGE 145
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪S24C300HL / S24C300H / S24C300B / S22C300N / S22C300H / S22C300F / S22C300B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪400 × 720 :IBM‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪70.087‬‬ ‫‪28.322‬‬ ‫‪+/-‬‬ ‫‪480 × 640 :MAC‬‬ ‫‪35.000‬‬ ‫‪66.667‬‬ ‫‪30.240‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪624 × 832 :MAC‬‬ ‫‪49.726‬‬ ‫‪74.551‬‬ ‫‪57.284‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪870 × 1152 :MAC‬‬ ‫‪68.681‬‬ ‫‪75.062‬‬ ‫‪100.
PAGE 146
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬ .‫ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬،‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬ NORTH AMERICA http://www.samsung.com/us 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) U.S.A http://www.samsung.com/ca (English) 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) CANADA http://www.samsung.com/ca_fr (French) LATIN AMERICA http://www.samsung.com.ar 0800 333 3733 ARGENTINE http://www.samsung.com 800-10-7260 BOLIVIA http://www.samsung.com.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ LATIN AMERICA http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) 800-27919267 HONDURAS http://www.samsung.com 1-800-234-7267 JAMAICA http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) 001-800-5077267 NICARAGUA http://www.samsung.com 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) MEXICO http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) 800-7267 PANAMA http://www.samsung.com.py 009 800 542 0001 PARAGUAY http://www.samsung.com/pe 0-800-777-08 PERU http://www.samsung.com 1-800-682-3180 PUERTO RICO http://www.samsung.
PAGE 148
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ EUROPE http://www.samsung.com 0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw. GERMANY 0180 6 7267864* (*0,20 €/Anruf aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk max. 0,60 €/Anruf) http://www.samsung.com/gr 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 7864) only from land line GREECE (+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line http://www.samsung.com/hu 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) HUNGARY http://www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) ITALIA http://www.samsung.com/lv 8000-7267 LATVIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 149
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ CIS http://www.samsung.com 0-800-05-555 ARMENIA http://www.samsung.com 088-55-55-555 AZERBAIJAN http://www.samsung.com 810-800-500-55-500 BELARUS http://www.samsung.com 0-800-555-555 GEORGIA http://www.samsung.com 8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 7799) KAZAKHSTAN http://www.samsung.com 00-800-500-55-500 KYRGYZSTAN http://www.samsung.com 0-800-614-40 MOLDOVA http://www.samsung.com +7-800-555-55-55 MONGOLIA http://www.samsung.com 8-800-555-55-55 RUSSIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ MENA http://www.samsung.com/n_africa 0800 100 100 ALGERIA http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) 8000-4726 BAHRAIN http://www.samsung.com 08000-726786 EGYPT http://www.samsung.com 021-8255 IRAN http://www.samsung.com/Levant (English) 0800-22273 JORDAN http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) 183-2255 (183-CALL) KUWAIT http://www.samsung.com 080 100 2255 MOROCCO http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) OMAN http://www.samsung.
PAGE 151
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ AFRICA http://www.samsung.com/africa_en 0800-726-7864 NIGERIA http://www.samsung.com 847267864 / 827267864 MOZAMBIQUE http://www.samsung.com 9999 RWANDA http://www.samsung.com/africa_fr 800-00-0077 SENEGAL http://www.samsung.com 0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864) SOUTH AFRICA http://www.samsung.com 1969 SUDAN http://www.samsung.com 0685 88 99 00 TANZANIA http://www.samsung.com 0800 300 300 UGANDA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 152
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮّﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 768 × 1366‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1366‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭ ‪ 768‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 1080 × 1920‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1920‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭ ‪ 1080‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‪.